Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsLG ManualsMobile PhonesKE990-Viewty

KE990 ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ ﯼﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ

www.lgmobile.com

P/N : MMBB0269412 (1.0) H P/N : MMBB0269412 (1.0) H

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

ENGLISH

KE990 KE990

ELECTRONICS INC.

www.lgmobile.com

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

ENGLISH

Summary of content (194 pages)

PAGE 1
www.lgmobile.com P/N : MMBB0269412 (1.0) H ELECTRONICS INC. KE990 KE990 ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ENGLISH ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ENGLISH KE990 P/N : MMBB0269412 (1.0) H www.lgmobile.
PAGE 2
Bluetooth QD ID B013158
PAGE 3
‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮐﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ KE990‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺮﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﯼ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫‪08‬‬
PAGE 6
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪8 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﺯ ‪9 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ‪10 ........................‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪12 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‪13 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪14 ............‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪15 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪16 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪17 ......
PAGE 7
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪34 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭﯼ‪34 ............................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ ‪34 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ‪35 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﺶ ‪36 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪36 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪37 .......
PAGE 8
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪57 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻦ‪57 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍ‪57 .................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻦ ‪57 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﯼ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪57 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪58 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ‪58 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ‪58 .........................
PAGE 9
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪72 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪72 ........‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪72 ...............‬‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪72 ..........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪73 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪73 .....................
PAGE 10
‫ﻧﻤ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺒﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‪/‬ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻕ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺵ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﮎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﯼ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﯼ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼ‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﮎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻼﻳﻤﺖ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺟﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ KE990 .‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪2GB‬‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺟﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫ﺪ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ KE990‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻮﺭﯼ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ‬ ‫“ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ” ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 17
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﮏ‪-‬ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ GPRS‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ‬ ‫)ﺳﺎﻳﻠﻨﺖ(‪،‬ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻧﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺨﺖ ‪ C‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺨﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﭼﺮﺥ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺯﮔﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﮑﺮﺭﺍً ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺩﻓ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪ -‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ )ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﯽ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 26
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ‪ -‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 27
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﯼ‬ ‫ﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ KE990‬ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 29
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺨﺖ ‪ C‬ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻮﯼ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﻢ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T9‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ )T‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺳﺮﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 30
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪،KE990‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻠﯽ ‪ POP3‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ IMAP4‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺖ‬ ‫ﮎ‬ ‫ﮎ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﯼ‪،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮎ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ ،POP3، 110‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮎ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ IMAP4، 143‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ - SMTP‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪ - SMTP‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪ SMTP‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ‪ - SMTP‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ SMTP‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪ - APOP‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪ APOP‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮎ ‪POP3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ..‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮎ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ IMAP4‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﯼ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﯼ‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﯼ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﻭﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ KE990‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪.‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺳﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪36‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪/‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﺰﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ -‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﺰﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 38
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﯼ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰﯼ ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻪ ﺁﻟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺒﻬﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﻬﻢ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺰﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪,‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﻢ‬ ‫ﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺎﻟﺮﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﯼ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪.‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺳﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫‪ - 120fps‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ 120‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪15‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺒﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ‪ -‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪/‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻪ ﺁﻟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺒﻬﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﻬﻢ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻢ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 48
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ 30‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪ fps 120‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ 15‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺸﮕﺮﯼ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ‬ ‫‪ KE990‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‬ ‫‪ 640X384‬ﻭ ‪ 640x480‬ﺳﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﯼ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ KE990‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‪ 320x240‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 176x144‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺎﻟﺮﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﮑﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻄﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﯼ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﯼ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻭ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ AVI‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 3GP‬ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻳﺎ ‪ GIF‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﯼ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﯼ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﯼ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺮﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﯼ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﻫﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﺒﺨﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 54
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻣﻀﺎء ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺒﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻨﺮﯼ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ +‬ﺭﻭﯼ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 56
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﯼ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺰﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﯼ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﮕﯽ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ -‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ‪ -‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﻃﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ -‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ‪.YouTube‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ -‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ‪ -‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﮑﺲ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ -‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ‪/‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ -‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ -‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ -‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪SWF‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪Excel،‬‬ ‫‪ ،Powerpoint، Word‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ PDF‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤ‬ ‫ﺯﻣ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪SWF‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﯼ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﮕﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺭﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ .
PAGE 67
‫ﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ -‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‪ 1 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪ -‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻦ ‪ -‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﯼ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 12‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﯼ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺰﺍﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻟﮕﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪60 ،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 2007/01/10‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ‪ .
PAGE 72
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﯼ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ‪-‬ﺟﻤﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ‪-‬ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ‪-‬‬ ‫ﻳﮑﺸﻨﺒﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 73
‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮑﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﻤﺨﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﯼ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ LG Phone‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ‪ DivX‬ﺭﻭﯼ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﯽ ﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ DivX‬ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ‪ DivX‬ﻭ ﺳﺮﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﮔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﻮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻭﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﯼ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 79
‫ﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ KE990‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪:USB‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺪ‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 22‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ -‬ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﯼ ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ KE990‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 72‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪ -‬ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ -‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ‪ NTSC‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ KE990‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺖ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ KE990‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ KE990‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺅﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪85‬‬
PAGE 88
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪ KE990‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﯽ ﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫‪ KE990‬ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺯﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺪ ﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫‪ | LG KE990 86‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺠﺎﻣﺪ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫‪87‬‬
PAGE 90
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺶ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫‪GSM 900، DCS 1800، PCS 1900‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎً ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﯼ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 91
PAGE 92
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺮﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﯼ‬ ‫ﯼ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺝ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ!‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺠﺎﻣﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﮎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﮐﻴﺪﺍً ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﯽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 96
PAGE 97
MEMO
PAGE 98
MEMO
PAGE 99
Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
PAGE 100
Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact KE990 phone by LG, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology.
PAGE 101
G, Set up 01 Your standby screen 02 The basics 03 Get creative 04 Get organised 05 The web 06 Settings 07 Accessories 08
PAGE 102
Contents Set up Getting to know your phone ......................... 8 Open view .................................................. 9 Installing the SIM and battery..................... 10 Memory card ............................................ 12 Menu map ................................................ 13 Your standby screen Touchscreen tips ....................................... 14 The quick keys.......................................... 15 The status bar ..........................................
PAGE 103
23 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 29 29 30 30 31 32 32 32 33 33 Get creative Your photos and videos ............................ 48 Viewing your photos and videos .............. 48 Camera .................................................. 34 Using zoom when viewing a video Taking a quick photo .............................. 34 or photo ................................................ 48 After you’ve taken your photo .................
PAGE 104
Contents Creating a slide show............................. 56 Playing a song ....................................... 63 Checking your memory status ................ 57 Creating a playlist .................................. 63 My sounds ............................................ 57 Editing a playlist .................................... 64 Using a sound ....................................... 57 Deleting a playlist .................................. 64 My videos ...........................................
PAGE 105
63 63 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 66 66 66 67 68 68 68 69 69 69 70 70 70 71 71 PC Sync .................................................. 72 Installing LG PC Suite on your computer.. 72 Connecting your phone and PC............... 72 Backing up and restoring your phone’s information............................................ 72 Viewing your phone ﬁles on your PC ....... 73 Synchronising your contacts ................... 73 Synchronising your emails ......................
PAGE 106
Getting to know your phone Charger, Cable, Handsfree connector TIP: To connect the USB cable, wait until the phone has powered up and has registered to the network. O Camera mode Lock/ Unlock key (Image Stabilization key in Camera) End/Power key Ends or rejects a call. Turns the phone on/off. Press once to return to the standby screen. Clear key Deletes a character with each press. Call key Dials a phone number and answers incoming calls.
PAGE 107
de Jog wheel Zooms in or out when in camera or video mode. Scrolls through menus. TIP: You can adjust volume level when enjoying music, game and during a call. WARNING: Close contact with a magnetic object may cause a malfunction of the wheel key.
PAGE 108
Installing the SIM and battery 1) Remove the battery cover Press and hold down the battery release button at the top of the phone and lift off the battery cover. 2) Remove the battery Hold the top edge of the battery and lift the battery from the battery compartment by using the battery cover. In 3) WARNING: Do not use your ﬁngernail when removing the battery. WARNING: Do not remove the battery when the phone is switched on, as this may damage the phone.
PAGE 109
he Installing the SIM and battery 01 02 03 04 3) Install the SIM card Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. To remove the SIM card, pull it gently in the reverse direction. 05 06 07 08 Set up 4) Install the battery Insert the top of the battery ﬁrst into the top edge of the battery compartment. Ensure the battery contacts align with the terminals on the phone. Press down the bottom of the battery until it clips into place.
PAGE 110
Memory card Installing a memory card Expand the memory space available on your phone using a memory card. The KE990 will support up to a 2GB memory card. TIP: Memory card is an optional accessory. 1) Remove the battery and battery cover as before. 2) Insert memory card. Slide the memory card into the slot at the top, until it clicks into place. Make sure that the gold contact area is facing downwards. M 1) From the standby screen select , then touch and choose Phone settings.
PAGE 111
Menu map n 01 02 03 ur 04 05 06 Dialling Contacts My stuff Camera Browser Google Screen Proﬁles Muvee studio Music Organiser Alarms Phone settings Call settings Video playlists Voice recorder Memos Tools Flight mode Bluetooth FM radio Games & Apps 07 08 e Call logs Messaging Set up 13
PAGE 112
Your standby screen Whenever your KE990 isn’t in use it’ll return to your home screen. From here you access all the menu options, make a quick call and view the status of your phone - as well as many other things. Status bar Multitasking Th ac Touchscreen tips The home screen is also a great place to get accustomed to the touch screen. To select an item touch the icon accurately. Your KE990 will vibrate slightly when it recognises you’ve touched an option.
PAGE 113
The quick keys The quick keys provide easy, one-touch access to your most used functions. 01 02 Touch to open the full menu which is separated into four sub-menus. Touch each sub-menu’s vertical tab to view further options. Touch to access the Messaging options menu. From here you can create a new SMS/MMS or email, or view your message folder. See page 26 for details. Touch to bring up the touch dialling pad to make a call. Input the number as you would using a normal key pad and touch or press the .
PAGE 114
Your standby screen The status bar Ch To pro ap tou The status bar indicates, using various icons, things like signal strength, new messages and battery life as well as telling you whether your Bluetooth or GPRS is active. Below is a table which explains the meaning of icons you’re likely to see in the status bar.
PAGE 115
Changing your proﬁle from the status bar Touch the icon that represents your current proﬁle setting in the status bar. Select a proﬁle type, for example Silent, and touch OK to save and close. The shortcut menu Using the Multitasking function Touch to open the Multitasking menu. From here you can view all the applications you have running and access them with one touch.
PAGE 116
Calls Making a call Making a call from your contacts to open the keypad. 1 Touch 2 Key in the number using the keypad. 1 From the standby screen touch To delete a digit press the C hard key. 3 Touch or hard key to initiate the call. 4 To end the call press the hard key. 2 Enter the ﬁrst few letters of the contact TIP! To enter + for making an international call, touch twice. TIP! Press the lock/unlock button to lock the touchscreen to prevent calls being made by mistake.
PAGE 117
In-call options Mute - Touch to turn off the microphone so the person you are talking to cannot hear you. Speaker - Touch speaker phone. e u Hold - Touch to put a caller on hold. Touch Resume to continue your conversation. to open a numerical Keypad - Touch keypad for navigating menus with numbered options. For example when dialling call centres or other automated telephone services.
PAGE 118
Calls Speed dialling You can assign a frequently-called contact to a speed dial number. 1 Touch and select Contacts. 2 Touch Speed dials. 3 Your Voicemail is already set to speed dial 1. You cannot change this. Touch any other number to assign it a speed dial contact. 4 Your address book will open. Select the contact you’d like to assign to that number by touching their phone number once.
PAGE 119
ds es. Missed calls - View the list of all the calls you have missed. Call charges - View the charges applied to your dialled numbers (this service is network dependant, some operators are unable to support this) and the call duration of all your calls; received and dialled. Data volume - View the amount in kilobytes of all your received and sent data. TIP! From any call log touch delete all the recorded items.
PAGE 120
Calls C Changing the common call setting Se 1 Touch Th , select and choose Call setting. 2 Touch Common setting. From here you can amend the settings for: Call reject - Select On or Off and choose to reject all calls, of those from speciﬁc groups, contacts or from unregistered numbers (those not in your contacts). Send my number - Choose whether your number will be displayed when you call someone. Auto redial - Choose On or Off.
PAGE 121
Contacts Searching for a contact Adding a new contact There are two ways to search for a contact: 1 From the standby screen touch From the standby screen 1 From the standby screen touch to open the address book. 2 Enter the ﬁrst few letters of the contact you’d like to ﬁnd using the keypad. TIP! You can search by group by touching and selecting Search by group. This will bring up a list of all your groups. From the main menu 1 Select Contacts.
PAGE 122
Contacts Add new contact - You can add new entry. Mark/Unmark - You can select one or more contacts for multiple deletion. Search by group - You can search the entry by group. Contact options There are many things you can do when viewing a contact. Here’s how to access and use the options menu: 1 Open the contact you’d like to use. See The basics Searching for a contact on page 23. 2 Press to open the list of options. From here you can: Edit - Change any of the contact’s details.
PAGE 123
be Changing your contact settings You can adapt your contact settings so that your address book works in the way you prefer. TIP! To scroll through a list of options, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. 1 From the standby screen touch 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Viewing information 1 From the standby screen touch and select Contacts. 2 Select Infomation.
PAGE 124
Messaging Messaging Entering text T9 Your KE990 combines SMS, MMS and email into one intuitive and easy to use menu. There are four ways to enter text: T9 predictive, Abc manual, Keyboard and Handwriting recognition. In There are two ways to access the Messaging menu. 1 Touch from the standby screen. 2 Touch from the standby screen, then Messaging. Sending a message 1 Touch 2 3 4 5 then choose Create new message. Choose Message to send an SMS or MMS. Or to send an email, choose Email.
PAGE 125
h x 23 T9 predictive In T9 mode you will see Keyboard . T9 mode uses a built-in dictionary to recognise words you’re writing based on the key sequences you touch. Simply touch the number key associated with the letter you want to enter, and the dictionary will recognise the word once all the letters are entered. For example, press 8, 3, 5, 3, 7, 4, 6, 6, 3 to write ‘telephone’. If the word you want doesn’t appear, touch or Spell.
PAGE 126
Messaging Setting up your email You can stay in touch on the move using email on your KE990. It’s quick and simple to set up a POP3 or IMAP4 email account. TIP! To scroll through a list of option, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. 1 2 3 4 The basics Touch then select Settings. Touch Email then Email accounts. Open and touch Add new. You can now choose how your account works: Title - Enter a name for this account.
PAGE 127
4 h APOP secure login - Choose to activate APOP secure login for a POP3 account. IMAP4 accounts are always set to off. Now your account is set up, it will appear in the list of accounts in your Email folder. Retrieving your email You can automatically or manually check your account for new email. See ‘Change your email settings’ to check automatically. To check manually: 1 Touch then Email.
PAGE 128
Messaging Changing your email settings You can adapt your email settings so that it works in the way you prefer. TIP! To scroll through a list of option, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. 1 Touch then open Settings. 2 Touch Email then Email accounts and The basics then you can adapt the following settings: Allow reply email - Choose to allow the sending of ‘read conﬁrmation’ messages.
PAGE 129
nd ur Managing your messages You can use your Inbox to manage your messages. TIP! To scroll through a list of option, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. ls. ve 1 Touch 2 Touch 01 If you see the message No space for SIM message you should delete some messages from your inbox. 02 If you see the message No space for messages you can delete either messages or saved ﬁles to create space.
PAGE 130
Messaging Using templates Changing your text message settings Create templates for the SMS and MMS messages you send most frequently. You’ll ﬁnd some templates already on your phone, you can edit these if you wish. Your KE990 message settings are pre-deﬁned so that you can send messages immediately. If you’d like to change the settings, see below for more information. 1 Touch then choose Templates. 2 Choose Text templates or Multimedia templates.
PAGE 131
gs ed y. w d. ze s. Changing your multimedia message settings Your KE990 message settings are pre-deﬁned so that you can send messages immediately. If you’d like to change the settings, see below for more information. TIP! To scroll through a list of option, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. Touch then choose Settings then Multimedia message.
PAGE 132
Camera Taking a quick photo After you’ve taken your photo 1 Move the camera mode switch to . 2 Open the camera lens cover using the lens Your captured photo will appear on screen. The name of the image runs along the bottom of the screen together with four icons down the right side. 3 4 5 6 7 cover switch located near the camera lens. The camera’s viewﬁnder will appear on screen. Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject of the photo.
PAGE 133
Getting to know the viewﬁnder om 01 Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on page 39 for details. 03 Camera mode - Camera mode is selected. 02 04 05 Flash status Macro on/off 06 Flash - See Using the ﬂash on page 36. 07 Quick settings 08 Contrast - See Adjusting the contrast on page 37. Shot type - See Choosing a shot type on page 37. Back - Touch here to return to the standby screen.
PAGE 134
Camera Using the ﬂash The ﬂash is set to Auto as default, but there are other options. 1 Select from the top right corner of the viewﬁnder to enter the ﬂash sub-menu. 2 There are three ﬂash options: Get creative Auto - Your camera will assess the lighting needed to take a good picture and use the ﬂash as necessary. Red-eye reduction - The camera will ﬂash twice in order to reduce red eye. Always off - The camera will never ﬂash. This is useful if you want to save battery power.
PAGE 135
ge Adjusting the contrast n Contrast deﬁnes the difference between light and dark in an image. A low contrast image will appear foggy, whereas a high contrast image will appear much sharper. r t 1 Touch . 2 Slide the contrast indicator along the bar, towards for a lower contrast, hazier image or towards for a higher contrast, sharper image. Frame - Choose from one of the fun frames to transform your friend into a pirate or just decorate their surroundings.
PAGE 136
Camera Using continuous shot mode Taking a panoramic shot Us Continuous shot mode is great for taking photos of moving objects or at sporting events. Capture life as it appears using panoramic shot. The camera will let you take three photo’s, all aligned, and combine them into one image so that your wide angle view becomes a panoramic photo. Fro the 1 Touch 2 3 4 5 to open the available shot types and select Continuous.
PAGE 137
to, ly. Using the advanced settings From the viewﬁnder touch to open all the advanced settings options. Image size - Change the size of the photo to save on memory space or take a picture preset to the correct size for contact. See Changing the image size on page 40. Image quality - Choose between Super ﬁne, Fine and Normal. The ﬁner the quality the sharper a photo will be but the ﬁle size will increase as a result, which means you’ll be able to store fewer photos in your memory.
PAGE 138
Camera Note: Always touch Save after selecting a new setting to implement the changes you’ve made. TIP! When you exit the camera all your settings will return to default, except image size and image quality. Any non-default settings you require will need to be reset, for example colour tone and ISO. Check them before you shoot your next photo.
PAGE 139
al nd Viewing your saved photos Viewing the details of a photo 1 You can access your saved photo’s from 1 Touch the photo to bring it to the front within the camera mode and from the standby screen. From within the camera you simply move the camera mode switch to , whilst from the standby screen you should move the camera mode switch to and then press the capture button. 2 Your gallery will appear on screen. of the gallery screen. 2 Touch the icon in the bottom right corner of the photo.
PAGE 140
Video camera Shooting a quick video After you’ve shot your video 1 Move the camera mode switch to . 2 Open the camera lens cover using the lens A still image representing your captured video will appear on screen. The name of the image runs along the bottom of the screen together with three icons down the right side. 3 4 5 6 7 cover switch located near the camera lens. The video camera’s viewﬁnder will appear on screen. Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject of the video.
PAGE 141
Getting to know the viewﬁnder eo ge er 01 Zoom - Touch to zoom in or to zoom out. Alternatively you can use the jog wheel around the lens. 02 03 Video mode - Video mode is selected. Image size 04 Saving to handset memory/ External memory 05 120fps - Smaller image size with Quad Speed Playback, capturing the action at an impressive 120 frames per second. Playback is at 15 frames per second for the best view in the house. Great for capturing high speed action.
PAGE 142
Video camera Adjusting the contrast Contrast deﬁnes the difference between light and dark in an image. A low contrast image will appear foggy, whereas a high contrast image will appear much sharper. 1 Touch . 2 Slide the contrast indicator along the bar, towards for a lower contrast, hazier image, or towards for a higher contrast, sharper image. Using the advanced settings From the viewﬁnder touch advanced settings options. to open all the Image quality - Choose between Super ﬁne, Fine and Normal.
PAGE 143
e le Memory in use - Choose whether to save your videos to the Handset memory or to the External memory. Note: Always touch Save after selecting a new setting to implement the changes you’ve made. TIP! When you exit the video camera all your settings will return to default, except image size and image quality. Any non-default settings you require will need to be reset, for example colour tone and white balance. Check them before you shoot your next video.
PAGE 144
Video camera 4 Select the size option you’d like to use and touch Save to implement your changes. The settings menu will automatically close, ready for you to shoot your video. Note: When you view your videos, playback speed is 30 frames per second, with the exception of 120 fps where playback is at 15 frames per second.. WARNING: The great editing software on your LG KE990 is compatible with all video types except 640X384 and 640x480. Don’t record in this format if you plan to edit your video.
PAGE 145
e, r Watching your videos on your TV Connect your KE990 to your TV using the TV output cable. Open the video you’d like to watch on TV, press and select . 01 Note: The TV output cable is available for purchase separately. 03 WARNING: All formats except 320x240 and 176x144 are compatible with watching on TV.
PAGE 146
Your photos and videos Viewing your photos and videos 1 From the standby screen, move the Using zoom when viewing a video or photo camera mode switch to and press the capture button. 2 Your gallery will appear on screen. To zoom in press repeatedly. To zoom out press . Use the thumbnail in the bottom right corner to move the focus area. Adjusting the volume when viewing a video 3 Touch the video or photo you want to view once to bring it to the front of the gallery.
PAGE 147
ut ng o e ch Viewing the details of a video or photo Videos and photos are grouped together in the gallery. If you have trouble telling which are photos and which are videos, check the details. For example, videos may be AVI or 3GP ﬁle types and photos may be JPEG or GIF ﬁle types. 1 Touch the video still or photo to bring it to the front of the gallery screen. icon in the bottom right corner of the video still or photo.
PAGE 148
Your photos and videos Viewing your photos as a slide show Slideshow mode will show all the photos in your gallery one at a time as a slideshow. Videos can not be viewed as a slideshow. 1 Touch the photo you would like to begin the slideshow twice to open it. 2 Touch the left side of the screen to open the options menu. 3 Select . 4 The slideshow will begin. / Touch to pause the slideshow on a particular photo. Touch again to resume playback.
PAGE 149
Editing your photos There are loads of great things you can do to your photos to change them, add to them or liven them up a little. 1 Open the photo you’d like to edit and touch to bring up the options. 2 Select . The following screen will be displayed. Decorate your photo with stamps. Choose from the different stamps available and touch your photo wherever you’d like them to be. To change the colour of a stamp see below. 3 Touch the icons to adapt your photo: Crop your photo.
PAGE 150
Your photos and videos Adding text to a photo 1 From the editing screen, touch . 2 Select Signature to add unframed text or choose either of the speech bubble shapes. 3 Enter your text using the keypad and touch Done. 4 Move the text by touching it and sliding it to the place you’d like it to be. Adding an effect to a photo 1 From the editing screen, touch . 2 Choose to apply any of the six options to the photo: Soften - Move the marker along the bar to soften the focus of the photo.
PAGE 151
ze 3 Select part of the photo. A traced line will Morphing a photo Morphing a photo is great for changing the facial expressions of friends, or just for distorting a photo for artistic effect. 1 From the editing screen touch . 2 Choose Morphing and four crosses will appear on the photo. 4 5 3 Move the crosses around the photo so they are on the part you’d like to morph. For example, if you are morphing a face, place a cross on the outside corner of each eye and one each side of the lips.
PAGE 152
Multimedia You can store any multimedia ﬁles into your phone’s memory so that you have easy access to all of your pictures, sounds, videos and games. You can also save your ﬁles to a memory card. The advantage of using a memory card is that you can free up space on your phone’s memory. To access the Multimedia menu, touch then . Touch My stuff to open a list of folders storing all of your multimedia ﬁles.
PAGE 153
. photo will be attached to the message and you can write and send the message as normal. If you choose Bluetooth, you will be prompted to turn Bluetooth on and your phone will search for a device to send the picture to. Organising your images 1 2 3 4 Touch then . Touch My stuff then My images. Touch then Sort by. Choose from Date, Type or Name. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Note: As well as sorting your images by category, you can also manually sort them by using the Move option.
PAGE 154
Multimedia Moving or copying an image Creating a slide show Ch You can move or copy an image between the phone memory and the memory card. You might want to do this to either free up some space in one of the memory banks or to safeguard your images from being lost. If you want to look at all of the images on your phone or scan through what you’ve got, you can create a slide show to save you from having to open and close each individual image. Yo me mu 1 2 3 4 Touch then .
PAGE 155
Checking your memory status My videos You can check to see how much of your memory space you have used and how much you have left to use. The My videos folder shows the list of downloaded videos and videos you have recorded on your phone. 1 Touch then . 2 Touch My stuff then My images. Watching a video 3 Touch then Memory manager. 4 Choose Handset memory or External memory. 1 Touch then . 2 Touch My stuff then My videos. 3 Select a video and touch Play.
PAGE 156
Multimedia Using options while video is paused Touch while in pause mode and choose from: Capture - Capture the frozen frame as a picture. File info. - View the Name, Size, Date, Time, Type, Duration, Dimension, Protection and Copyright details. Send - Send the video in a Message, Email, Bluetooth and Youtube. Delete - Delete the video. Use as - Use the video as a ringtone. Video editor - Edit the video clip.
PAGE 157
e e d nd ne. e Copy - Copy a video clip from the phone memory to a memory card or vice versa. Delete - Delete a video. Rename - Rename a video. Mark/Unmark - Select multiple ﬁles. Create new folder - Create a new folder within the My videos folder. Sort by - Sort videos into a speciﬁc order. Memory manager - View the memory status. My games and apps You can download new games and applications to your phone to help keep you amused when you have time to spare. Playing a game 1 Touch then .
PAGE 158
Multimedia Flash contents Transferring a ﬁle to your phone Ot The Flash contents folder contains all of your default and downloaded SWF ﬁles. Viewing an SWF ﬁle Bluetooth is probably the easiest way to transfer a ﬁle from your computer to your phone. You can also use LG PC Suite via your sync cable, see page 72 for details. 1 Touch To transfer using Bluetooth: Th are ap Do yo ph rat ha then . 2 Touch My stuff then Flash contents. 3 Select the ﬁle and touch View.
PAGE 159
ve Others Muvee studio The Others folder is used to store ﬁles which are not pictures, sounds, videos, games or applications. It is used in the same way as the Documents folder. You may ﬁnd that when you transfer ﬁles from your computer to your phone that they appear in the Others folder rather than the Documents folder. If this happens you can move them. The Muvee studio allows you to create an image slide show combined with music.
PAGE 160
Multimedia Creating a movie 1 Touch then . 2 Touch Muvee studio. 3 Touch to add an image. Touch the images you want to include then select Done. 4 Touch to choose a Muvee style. Select from: Classsic Forever Moody Moden Musical 5 Touch Play to see what you’ve created. 6 Touch then Save Location to choose where to save the movie. Music Your LG KE990 has built-in music player so you can play all your favourite tracks. To access the music player, touch then then Music.
PAGE 161
ne Playing a song Creating a playlist 1 Touch then . 2 Touch Music, then All tracks. 3 Select the song you want to play and You can create your own playlists by choosing a selection of songs from the All tracks folder. 01 1 Touch then . 2 Touch Music, then Playlists. 03 4 5 6 7 touch Play. Touch to pause the song. Touch to skip to the next song. Touch to skip to the previous song. Touch to stop the music and return to the Music menu. TIP! To change the volume while listening to music, touch .
PAGE 162
Multimedia Editing a playlist Video playlists From time to time, you may want to add new songs or delete songs from a playlist. When you want to do this, you can edit the playlist. All of your videos are stored in the Video playlists menu. 1 Touch then . 2 Touch Music, then Playlists. 3 Select the playlist. 4 Touch and select: Add new songs – To add more songs to the playlist. Mark the ones you want and touch Done. Move up/down – Move the song up or down the list to change the playing order.
PAGE 163
Quality – Select the sound quality. Choose from Super Fine, Fine or Normal. Go to my sounds – Open the Voice recordings folder in My sounds. Recording a sound or voice 1 2 3 4 5 Touch then . Touch Voice recorder. Touch to begin recording. Touch to end recording. Touch to listen to your recording. Sending the voice recording 1 Once you have ﬁnished recording, touch . 2 Touch Send and choose from Message, Email or Bluetooth.
PAGE 164
Multimedia Searching for stations Editing the channels Li You can tune radio stations into your phone by searching for them either manually or automatically. They will then be saved to speciﬁc channel numbers so you don’t have to keep re-tuning. You can save up to 12 channels in your phone. You may want to move the stations to another channel so that the ones you listen to most frequently are easier to access. 1 2 To auto tune: 1 Touch then . 2 Touch FM radio then . 3 Touch Auto scan then Yes.
PAGE 165
Listening to the radio er 1 Touch then . 2 Touch FM radio then touch the channel number of the station you would like to listen to. TIP! To improve the radio reception, extend the headset cord, which functions as the radio antenna.
PAGE 166
Organiser Adding an event to your calendar 1 From the standby screen select 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 , then touch and choose Organiser. Select Calendar. Select the date you would like to add an event to. Touch then Add new event. Select whether you would like to add an Appointment, Anniversary or Birthday and touch OK. Check the date and enter time you would like your event to begin. For appointments and anniversaries enter the time and date your event ﬁnishes in the lower two time and date boxes.
PAGE 167
n Adding an item to your to do list Using date ﬁnder 1 From the standby screen select Date ﬁnder is a handy tool to help you calculate what the date will be after a certain amount of days has passed. For example, 60 days from 10.10.07 will be 09.12.2007. This is great for keeping tabs on deadlines. 01 1 From the standby screen select 04 , then touch and choose Organiser. 2 Select To do and touch Add. 3 Set the date for the to do item, add notes and select a priority level: High, Medium or Low.
PAGE 168
Organiser Setting your alarm 1 From the standby screen select 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Adding a memo , then and choose Alarms. Select and touch Add new. Set the time you would like the alarm to sound and touch Set. Choose whether you would like your alarm to sound Once, Daily, Mon - Fri, Mon - Sat, Sat - Sun or Except holiday. Press OK. Select to select a sound for your alarm. To listen to sounds touch the sound, followed by Play. After you have made your selection, touch Select. Add a memo for the alarm.
PAGE 169
n me Adding a city to your world clock Converting a unit 1 From the standby screen select 1 From the standby screen select , then touch and choose Tools. 2 Select World clock. 3 Touch the icon, followed by Add city. Start typing the name of the city you require and it will show at the top of the screen. Alternately touch Map, and select your chosen city from the map. 4 Touch Select to conﬁrm your choice.
PAGE 170
PC Sync You can synchronise your PC with your phone to make sure all your important details and dates match, but also as a backup to put your mind at ease. Installing LG PC Suite on your computer 1 From the standby screen select 2 3 4 5 6 7 , then and choose Phone settings. touch Select Connectivity, then USB connection mode. Select Data Service and touch OK. Insert the supplied CD into your PC. LG PC Suite Installer will appear on your screen. Click on LG PC Suite Installer.
PAGE 171
. sh. k uld Viewing your phone ﬁles on your PC Synchronising your contacts 1 Connect your phone to your PC as outlined 1 Connect your phone to your PC. 2 Click on the Contacts icon. 3 Select Transfer, then Import from above. 2 Click on the Contents icon. 3 All of the documents, ﬂash contents, images, sounds and videos you have saved onto your phone will be displayed on the screen in the LG Phone folder.
PAGE 172
PC Sync Synchronising your emails 1 Connect your phone to your PC. 2 Click on the Messages icon. 3 All of your PC and phone emails will be displayed in folders on your screen. 4 Use the tool bar at the top of your screen to edit and rearrange emails. Using your phone as a mass storage device You phone can only be used as a mass storage device if you have a memory card inserted. 1 Disconnect your phone from your PC. 2 From the standby screen select 3 4 5 6 , then touch and choose Phone settings.
PAGE 173
n d t DivX Converter Install the DivX converter which is supplied on the same CD as the PC Sync software. Once installed select DivX from the Program Files on your PC, then DivX converter followed by Converter. This will open the Converter application. Use the arrows in the application to change the conversion format to Mobile. If you do a right click on the application box and select Preferences, you can change the location of where the converted ﬁles are saved.
PAGE 174
The web With browser at the tip of your ﬁngers, you can get the up to date news and weather forecast as well as information on sports or trafﬁc whenever you need it. In addition, browser allows you to download the latest music, ringtones, wallpapers and games. Accessing the web 1 From the standby screen select , then touch and choose Browser. 2 To access the browser homepage directly, select Home. Alternately select Enter address and type in your desired URL, followed by Connect.
PAGE 175
n Saving a page Viewing your browser history 1 Access your required webpage as 1 From the standby screen select described above. 2 Touch and select Save this page. 3 Enter a name for the webpage so you can easily recognise it. 4 Touch Save. TIP! This menu will also allow you to edit titles of saved pages, protect or unprotect the screen memo, and delete saved pages. Accessing a saved page 1 From the standby screen select , then touch and choose Browser. 2 Select Saved pages.
PAGE 176
The web Using your phone as a modem Your KE990 can double as a modem for your PC, giving you email and internet access even when you can’t connect using wires. You can use either the USB cable or Bluetooth. Using the USB cable: 1 Ensure you have the LG PC Suite installed on your PC. 2 Connect your KE990 and your PC using the USB cable and launch the LG PC Suite software. 3 Click Communication on your PC. Then click Settings, set up a new proﬁle and select Modem. 4 Choose LG Mobile USB Modem and select OK.
PAGE 177
h 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 The web 79
PAGE 178
Settings Within this folder you can adapt your settings to make your KE990 personal to you. Note: For information on call settings see page 22. Changing your screen settings 1 Touch then choose . 2 Touch Screen settings and then choose from: Main screen theme - Choose the theme for your standby screen or outgoing call. Clock and Calendar - Choose what to be displayed on your standby screen. Brightness - Adjust the screen’s brightness. Backlight - Choose how long the backlight remains on for.
PAGE 179
e ﬁle nt nd g e. Changing your phone settings Enjoy the freedom of adapting your KE990 works so that it works in a way which suits you best. TIP! To scroll through a list of option, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. 1 Touch then choose .
PAGE 180
Settings Using memory manager Using ﬂight mode To Your KE990 has three memories available: the phone, the SIM Card and an external memory card (you may need to purchase the memory card separately). Turn on ﬂight mode by selecting , then . Touch Flight mode and select On. Flight mode will not allow you to make calls, connect to the Internet, send messages or use Bluetooth. 1 You can use memory manager to determine how each memory is used and see how much space is available. followed by .
PAGE 181
e n s. To receive a ﬁle: 1 To receive ﬁles your Bluetooth must be both On and Visible. See change your Bluetooth settings below for more information. 2 A message will prompt you to accept the ﬁle from the sender. Touch Yes to receive the ﬁle. 3 You will see where the ﬁle has been saved and you can choose to View the ﬁle or Use as wallpaper. Files will usually be saved to the relevant folder in My Stuff. Changing your Bluetooth settings: Note: This is the phone’s Bluetooth address.
PAGE 182
Settings Using a Bluetooth headset 1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible. 2 Follow the instructions that came with your headset to place your headset in pairing mode and pair your devices. 3 Touch Yes to Connect now. Your KE990 will automatically switch to Headset proﬁle. TIP! See page 22 for details on BT answer mode so that you can control how you answer calls when your Bluetooth headset is connected.
PAGE 183
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Settings 85
PAGE 184
Accessories These accessories are supplied with KE990. Charger Data cable and CD Connect and synchronise your KE990 and PC. Battery User Guide Learn more about your KE990. Stylus and carry strap Stereo headset Accessories 86 LG KE990 | User Guide Note • Always use genuine LG accessories. • Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty. • Accessories may be different in different regions; please check with our regional service company or agent for further inquires.
PAGE 185
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 .
PAGE 186
Network service Technical data The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 900, DCS 1800, PCS1900. General A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through your wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider.
PAGE 187
g)
PAGE 188
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient Use G Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. • • Emergency calls may not be available • WARNING • Mobile Phones must be switched off at all • times in an aircraft. • Do not hold the phone in your hand while driving. • Do not use your phone near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants or blasting operations.
PAGE 189
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient Use • While there may be differences between u gy on his s of Product care and maintenance WARNING! Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a • • • • • • • • • • • qualiﬁed service technician when repair work is required.
PAGE 190
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient Use Efﬁcient phone operation Electronics devices All mobile phones may get interference, which could affect performance. • Do not use your mobile phone near medical equipment without requesting permission. Avoid placing the phone over pacemakers, i.e. in your breast pocket. • Some hearing aids might be disturbed by mobile phones. • Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs, etc.
PAGE 191
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient Use Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of small children’s reach. It includes small parts which if detached may cause a choking hazard. Emergency calls y . Emergency calls may not be available under all mobile networks. Therefore, you should never depend solely on the phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability.
PAGE 192
M
PAGE 193
MEMO
PAGE 194
MEMO